operation manual

ManualsBrandsPhilips ManualsLED TVs49PUS7909/12

www.philips.com/welcome

49PUS7909

55PUS7909

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

Summary of content (122 pages)

PAGE 1
Register your product and get support at www.philips.
PAGE 2
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﺟﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪- 6.3‬‬ ‫‪- 6.4‬‬ ‫‪- 6.5‬‬ ‫‪- 6.6‬‬ ‫‪- 6.7‬‬ ‫‪- 6.8‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.1‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪Android‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.2‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪HD Ultra‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.4‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺗﺘﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.5‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.6‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.7‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪Skype - 1.8‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.9‬ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪ - 1.10‬ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪- 2.1‬‬ ‫‪- 2.
PAGE 3
‫‪- 15.2‬‬ ‫‪- 15.3‬‬ ‫‪- 15.4‬‬ ‫‪- 15.5‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺗَﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫‪ - 16‬ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪- 16.1‬‬ ‫‪- 16.2‬‬ ‫‪- 16.3‬‬ ‫‪- 16.4‬‬ ‫‪- 16.5‬‬ ‫‪- 25.1‬‬ ‫‪- 25.2‬‬ ‫‪- 25.3‬‬ ‫‪- 25.4‬‬ ‫‪- 25.5‬‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫‪ - 26‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫ﺃﺫﺭﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫‪ - 17‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫‪- 17.1‬‬ ‫‪- 17.2‬‬ ‫‪- 17.3‬‬ ‫‪- 17.
PAGE 4
‫‪1.3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢّ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻌﺾﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪Android‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ YouTube‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Twitter‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ )ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(‪ .
PAGE 5
‫ﻋﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1.7‬‬ ‫‪1.10‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﻮ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻤﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻌﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ‪ TV Remote App‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Philips‬ﻫﻮ ﺻﺪﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ‪ TV Remote App‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ‪ .
PAGE 6
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪TP‬‬ ‫‪Vision‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤّﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Europe B.V‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴؤﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻧﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻱ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪2.1‬‬ ‫‪2.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻛﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺴﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﻔﻒ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪Ambilight‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ‪.
PAGE 7
‫‪2.5‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻠﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻬﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ‪IEC Coax 75‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻡ ‪.RF‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ SAT 1‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 8
‫ ‪4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.WPS‬‬‫‪WPS‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋُﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 6‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪7 -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪3.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ PIN‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻊ ‪WPS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ‪ WPS‬ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ، PIN‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺤﺜًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪، WEP‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﺬّﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪(WoWLAN) Fi-Wi‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ‪.)WoWLAN (Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪… WoWLAN‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪.)WoWLAN (Wi-Fi‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ ‪3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺗﻢ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰّﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ "ﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ"‪ .
PAGE 11
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪4.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻤﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪EasyLink HDMI CEC‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺗﻚ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ ، EasyLink‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪EasyLink HDMI CEC‬ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫‪Y Pb Pr‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Y Pb Pr -‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮّﻥ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ .5.1‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪HDMI ARC‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓً ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ) ‪ ،(HTS‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ .
PAGE 13
‫ ‪3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪BACK‬‬ ‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ‪EasyLink‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻚ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪EasyLink‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ، EasyLink‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ‪EasyLink‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪EasyLink‬‬ ‫‪4.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ EasyLink‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 14
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ‪) ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻴّﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺻﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4.5‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺻّﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﻒ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ SCART‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺘﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ…‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ‪ 180‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ .
PAGE 17
‫‪4.8‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪DVD‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ ، SCART‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺘﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪-‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ‪Scart /‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺮﻛّﺐ‬ ‫( ‪ (CVBS‬ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺰﻭّﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ) ‪) CVBS‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) SCART‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺗؤﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪USB‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ‪USB‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‪ .‬ﺳﺘؤﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ = ‪OK‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ =ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ ، USB‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻙ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻻﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ Ultra HD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ Ultra HD‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺼﻐّﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ " ‪ " Ultra HD‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ Ultra HD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬ ‫‪ SOURCES‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4.16‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺗﺬﻛّﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪4.17‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤّﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻢ‪ .
PAGE 22
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪5.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪POWER‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺟﻮﻳﺴﺘﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴُﻀﻴء ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺿﻌﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺮﻏﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﻗﺎﺩﺭًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪...
PAGE 23
‫‪5.5‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻠﻖّ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.
PAGE 24
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪6.1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪HOME‬‬ ‫‪ - 1‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SOURCES‬‬ ‫‪‬‬‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪     - 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ ، ‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪- 1‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪INFO‬‬ ‫‪ - 4‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻣؤﺷﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﺸﻂ‪)  .‬ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﻬﻢ( ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺇﺑﻬﺎﻣﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ – OK‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ – ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﺮﻙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺫﺭﺍﻋﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ OK‬ﻭﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻫﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺑﻬﺎﻣﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ ‪6‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪7‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪] ،WATCH‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻗُﻞ "ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ"[ ‪-‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻭﻳﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪Spacebar‬‬ ‫‪ - 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭ ‪OK‬‬ ‫‪  - 7‬ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ Azerty /Qwerty‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ ،Cyrillic /Qwerty‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻧﺼﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Cyrillic‬ﻭ ‪Qwerty‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ‪Azerty‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪…Azerty‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ -‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ -‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪)Philips‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮﺍﺕ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ‪ ‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6.8‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻐﻠﻒ ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺭﻃﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺩًﺍ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.
PAGE 30
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪7.1‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ‪9‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ‬‫ ‪ 10‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 11‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،12 -‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ‪ ،Android‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،Android‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 31
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺟﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 32
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.BACK‬‬ ‫‪8.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻳﺤﺬﺭﻙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.
PAGE 33
‫‪EXIT‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪9.4‬‬ ‫™‪Chrome‬‬ ‫‪9.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ‪ ‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪Chrome‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗُﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪّﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 34
‫ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ…‬ ‫‪9.7‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪HOME ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬‫‪ OPTIONS‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻤﻨﺢ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬‫ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﻤﺮ ‪ 18‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪. Google‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪… Android‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪Android‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9.10‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺖ ﺩﻋﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.
PAGE 36
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺜﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﺠﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﻟﺘﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪ .
PAGE 37
‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪TV on Demand‬‬ ‫‪11.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺗﺘﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔً ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﺟﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .
PAGE 38
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺸﻔﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪12.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻛﺒﻞ ) ‪ (DVB-C‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﺩﺓً ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ 1001‬ﺻﻌﻮﺩًﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ . ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺷﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻋﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪LIST‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ‪*.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ‪ ‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪) ‬ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ( ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ )‬ ‫‪ ،(CAM‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻮﺭًﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ ‪ /‬ﻧﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔً‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﻠء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺼ‪/‬ﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،TEXT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪TEXT‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ…‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﻣﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 42
‫‪ 4 -‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬ ‫‪BACK‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻧﺼًﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ ﻣﺨﺼﺼًﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SUBTITLE‬‬ ‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.BACK ‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ…‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ( ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .
PAGE 45
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻً ﺑﻜﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪HDMI CEC‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪13.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ…‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬‫‪SOURCES‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴُﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬‫ﻳُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬‫‪ ، BACK‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 46
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ…‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪14.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺰﻭّﺩ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ ‪passive‬‬ ‫‪.3D‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ .
PAGE 47
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺠﻨّﺐ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻷﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ )ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻦ( ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﺪﺷﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﺭﺫﺍﺫ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ )ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ(‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪15.4‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪15.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ…‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬‫‪.MULTI VIEW‬‬ ‫‪ 2 -‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﻬﺎﻡﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣؤﺧﺮًﺍ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ، Chrome‬ﺇﻟﺦ ‪ -‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .
PAGE 49
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪16.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻻﻋﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻻﻋﺐ‪.
PAGE 51
‫‪17.3‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Miracast Fi-Wi‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪™. Wi-Fi Miracast‬‬ ‫‪17.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪Wi-Fi Certified‬‬ ‫‪ . ™Miracast‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Miracast‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ‪™،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪ .
PAGE 52
‫* ﺇﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Miracast‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪WiDi 3.5‬ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪17.4‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪)Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ " ‪") tvname _DIRECT‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻻ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪Miracast‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 53
‫• ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ + ‬ﺃﻭ ‪.- ‬‬ ‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ LIST‬ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ )ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪ ,(.‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.INFO‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓً ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ…‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪًﺍ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻏﺎﻥٍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪Pause TV‬‬ ‫‪18.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺚ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ…‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻬﻴﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪. OK‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪19.1‬‬ ‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺚ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ‪.
PAGE 56
‫‪19.3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ…‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪HOME ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪) ‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ( ﺃﻭ‪) ‬ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ( ﺃﻭ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗﺖ( ﺃﻭ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺘﻪ‪.
PAGE 57
‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠّﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Skype‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪Skype‬ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Skype‬ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪20.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪…Skype‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.Skype‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Skype‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Skype‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‪ .
PAGE 58
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ‪ ،‬ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Skype‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Skype‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻷﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ‪ Skype‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺜﺮ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪Skype‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪20.4‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺠّﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Skype‬ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Skype‬ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ…‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﻠﻴﻎ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 60
‫ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ – ‬ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ‪ Skype‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ‪ ، Skype‬ﺳﺠّﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ‪ Skype‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺸﺘﺮﻳﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Skype‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ‬ﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،Skype‬ﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 61
‫‪20.9‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪Skype‬ﻭﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ…‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺳﺠّﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Skype‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ، Skype‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫< ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3 -‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪20.10‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻚ‪.
PAGE 62
‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Room Multi‬‬ ‫ﺩﻓﻖ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪21.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ، Multi room‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩًﺍ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺃﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ*‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 63
‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ…‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺭﻣﺰﻩ ﻣﻦ ‪ . Smart TV‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Facebook‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Twitter‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Smart TV‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.
PAGE 64
‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪TV Remote App‬‬ ‫‪Philips‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ‪ TV Remote App‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Philips‬ﻫﻮ ﺻﺪﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ‪TV Remote App‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﺭﺳِﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺚ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ ﻭﺷﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ‪TV Remote App‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ‪ .
PAGE 65
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪24.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻋﻴﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﻧﻪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫< ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫< ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫<ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫< ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪WP .‬ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ‪BL‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 67
‫< ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ…‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‬ ‫< ‪Ultra‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪.Resolution‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬‫< ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫< ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ…‬ ‫• ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ‪ -‬ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻣﺬﻫﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻣﺬﻫﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ ،Clear Sound‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻜﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﻧﻪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻼً ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﻀﻪ ﻗﻠﻴﻼً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ – ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪sound‬‬ ‫‪ –bar‬ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻼً…‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫< ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫< ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪. ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ‪Ambilight‬‬ ‫‪ ،Ambilight‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ‪.Ambilight‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ…‬ ‫ﻛﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ .
PAGE 72
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ…‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫) ‪ ( Ambilight‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬‫ﻧﻤﻂ ‪.Ambilight‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪Ambilight‬‬‫< ‪ . hue +Ambilight‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻕﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 5‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬‫‪Philips Hue Bridge‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺼﻴﻼﺕ ‪…hue‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪Ambilight‬‬‫< ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫<ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﻠﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫< ‪Lounge‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪Ambilight‬‬‫< ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪.hue +Light‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗُﺮﺳﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ )‬ ‫‪ - (UTC‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺘًﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ…‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2 -‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﻟـﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻮﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﻄﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ…‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻀﺎﻑ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪24.9‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻴ‪/‬ﺎﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺧﻠﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺨﻠﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ…‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﻟـﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫< ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻤﻴﻦ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﺓً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪Q . . . LA‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫< ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫<ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻞﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﻗﺘًﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﻧﺴﺦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ ‪4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ ‪3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪3‬ﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺑﺤﺚ ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.5‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺏ ‪ -‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﻲ ﺃﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﻤّﻨﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺃﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ –‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪،2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺎﻥ‪ .
PAGE 80
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪Unicable‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ…‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Unicable‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ MDU‬ﺃﻭ ‪Unicable‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 81
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﻗﻨﻮﺍﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬّﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺭﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ" ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ‪ 3/4‬ﺃﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﻓﻴﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ…‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫< ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪25.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪25.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 83
this software for any purposewith or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyrightnotice and this permission notice appear in all copies.THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
PAGE 84
Voisine. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the MIT license, which can be found below. publicity relating to this software or products derived fromit. This software may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG Group'ssoftware".We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis ofcommercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims areassumed by the product vendor. Protobuf (2.
PAGE 85
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
PAGE 86
gain unless it is incidental;(ii) reproduction and distribution of the Software and Document in complete and unmodified form; and(iii) when you distribute the Software and Document, you agree to attach the Terms of Use and a statement that the latest version of the Terms of Use is available from the "Office of the Government Chief Information Officer" Web site (http://w ww.ogcio.gov.hk/en/business/tech_promotion/ccli/terms/t erms.htm). bound by the most updated version of the Terms of Use.3.
PAGE 87
Audio Codec SRC (1.8.1) This TV uses Audio Codec SRC which is used by libamphal.so.The original download site for this software is : https://ccrma.stanford.edu/~jos/resample/This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the LGPL v2, which can be found below.
PAGE 88
D-Bus is a simple system for interprocess communication and coordination.The original download site for this software is : http://dbus.freedesktop.orgThis piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of GPL V2. fusion (8.10.3) Fusion provides an implementation of abstractions needed for multi-threaded/multi-process programming: .The original download site for this software is : http://www.directfb.
PAGE 89
IPRoute2 (NA) IPRoute2 is used for TCP/IP,Networking and Traffic control.The original download site for this software is : htt p://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/netw orking/iproute2This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of GPL V2. substantial portions of the Software.
PAGE 90
Technology.Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
PAGE 91
daemonThe original download site for this software is : http://hostap.epitest.fi/wpa_supplicant/This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of GPL version 2.
PAGE 92
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
PAGE 93
indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
PAGE 94
are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights.
PAGE 95
are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1.
PAGE 96
and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
PAGE 97
contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all.
PAGE 98
AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
PAGE 99
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION 1. Definitions.
PAGE 100
notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License. where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted.
PAGE 101
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] 8. Limitation of Liability.
PAGE 102
or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.
PAGE 103
0. Definitions -------------- ============ Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they named as alpha, beta or final release.
PAGE 104
the terms of this license. forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted herein, subject to the following conditions: 4. Contacts ----------There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file (`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation.
PAGE 105
* ========================================== ========================== * * This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young * (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim * Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). * */ in * the documentation and/or other materials provided with the * distribution. * * 3.
PAGE 106
.‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ‬2 .‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻪ‬3  ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬4 ‫ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬،‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬،‫ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬BACK .‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ in the * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software * must display the following acknowledgement: * "This product includes cryptographic software written by * Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.
PAGE 107
‫‪26‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪26.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻟﺒﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ‪EC /2002/96‬ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﻑﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﻔﺌﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .
PAGE 108
‫‪26.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫• ‪ 60 - p 480 × 640‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫• ‪ 60 - p 600 × 800‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫• ‪ 60 - p 768 × 1024‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫• ‪ 60 - p 768 × 1280‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫• ‪ 60 - p 765 × 1360‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫• ‪ 60 - p 768 × 1360‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫• ‪ 60 - p 1024 × 1280‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫• ‪ 60 - p 1080 × 1920‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫• ‪ 24 - p 2160 × 3840‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 25 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 30 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Android‬‬ ‫‪Jelly Bean 4.2.2‬‬ ‫‪26.
PAGE 109
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ) ‪( DMS‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ‪ Microsoft Windows XP -‬ﺃﻭ ‪Vista‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪Windows 7‬‬ ‫– ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ‪DLNA‬‬ ‫‪®.certified‬‬ ‫ ‪Windows Media Player‬‬‫– ‪Microsoft‬‬ ‫• ‪Mac OS X‬‬ ‫– ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ‪DLNA‬‬ ‫‪®.certified‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫– ‪ TV Remote app‬ﻣﻦ ‪Android ،iOS Philips -‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.
PAGE 110
‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪Philips‬‬ ‫‪27.1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ،Philips‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ,‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 111
‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺗﻪ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪27.3‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ -‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.
PAGE 113
‫‪28‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻐﻄﻰ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺃﺛﺎﺙ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ( ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺧﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪28.
PAGE 114
‫‪28.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻜﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﺮﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻴء‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻄﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻼً‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨّﺐ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺃﺿﻮﺍﺀ ‪Ambilight LED‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺩًﺍ ﻛﺎﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻭﺑﻬﺖ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .
PAGE 115
‫ﻋﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﺠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Philips‬ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻼﻣﺘﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻼﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ) ‪ ( EMF‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ‪ Philips‬ﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺗﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗؤﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﺒًﺎ‪ .
PAGE 116
‫™ ‪DTS Premium Sound‬‬ ‫‪Windows Media‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Windows Media‬ﺇﻣّﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Microsoft‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘّﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DTS Premium Sound‬‬ ‫™‬ ‫‪Microsoft PlayReady‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ‪ ، DTS‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪. patents.dts.com ://http‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ‪DTS Licensing Limited‬‬ ‫‪ ,DTS .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ DTS‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ DTS 2.0‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪DTS © . Inc ,DTS‬‬ ‫‪ .Inc ،‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 118
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪71 Ambilight+hue‬‬ ‫‪73 Ambilight، Lounge Light‬‬ ‫‪73 Ambilight، Lounge Light+hue‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ‪71 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ‪72 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ‪6 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪73 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪71 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪108 Android OS،‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪13 CAM،‬‬ ‫™‪33 Chrome‬‬ ‫‪13 CI+‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ‪9 DMR،‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ( ‪78 DVB‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪11 DVI،‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪12 EasyLink‬‬ ‫‪11 EasyLink HDMI CEC‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮ
PAGE 119
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪51‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺢ ‪34‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪41‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ‪107‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ‪49‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ‪68‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ‪68‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪23‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ‪22‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪25‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﻝ ‪25‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪25‬‬ ‫‪ 19‬ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪19‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪36‬‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ،USB‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪ 19‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪38‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪15‬‬ ‫ﻣ
PAGE 120
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪51‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪66‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ‪67‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪32‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪32‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪80‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ‪49‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ‪41‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ‪75‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ‪111‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪30‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ‪106‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪65‬‬ ‫‪ 111‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Philips‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪41‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪30‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ‪82‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪82‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ‪32‬‬ ‫‪ 13‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪CAM ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬ
PAGE 121
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣؤﺷﺮ ‪25‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪24‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ‪27‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ‪28‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪26‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠّﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪27‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪15‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪14‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ‪28‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪78‬‬ ‫ﺡ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪78‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪34‬‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ‪74‬‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﻮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ ‪75‬‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ‪75‬‬ ‫ﻁ‬ ‫ﻃ
PAGE 122
Powered by TCPDF (www.tcpdf.org) Contact information Argentina 0800 444 7749 Buenos Aires 0810 444 7782 België / Belgique 070 700 035 (0,15€/min.) Bosna i Hercegovina 033 941 251 (Lokalni poziv) Brazil 0800 701 0245 Sao Paulo 2938 0245 Бълария 02 4916 273 (Национален номер) Česká republika 228880895 (Místní tarif) Danmark 3525 8314 Deutchland 0180 501 04 69 (0,14€/Min.) Ελλάδα 2111983028 (Εθνική κλήση) España 902 88 10 83 (0,10€ + 0,08€/min.